Canon | PowerShot G1 X Mark II | User guide | Canon PowerShot G1 X Mark II User guide

Canon PowerShot G1 X Mark II User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٨‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2014‬‬
‫‪CEL-SV4EA2N0‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًّﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪NB-12L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LG/CB-2LGE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪* *SDHC‬‬
‫‪٢ ١‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪* *SDXC‬‬
‫‪٢ ١‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.UHS-I‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺘﻨﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(< ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ i> :‬ﱠ‬
‫>‪) j‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) k> :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(< ‪/‬‬
‫>‪) g‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) h‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪*(LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) f‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(< ‪/‬‬
‫>‪) a‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ(<‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(<‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪/ <(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫)ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(<‬
‫>‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) l‬ﻋﺮﺽ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) b‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(< ‪/‬‬
‫)‪ / <(Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ / <(Macro) e‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) h‬ﻓﻼﺵ(< ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ / <(ISO‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪.(١٤٥ =) NFC‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻕٍ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫> < ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫> < ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ‪ ١٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ ١٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ ١٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ ١٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫=‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪٢......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ‪٢............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪٢........‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٣........................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪٥....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪٧.....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٨...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪١١ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪١٧ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪٢١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢١.................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٩٨ .............................. RAW‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٩٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪٢٢ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪٢٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٢٣ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪٢٤ .....................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٥ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٥ .......................... FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٢٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٢٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٩ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٣٠.............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣١ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ‪٣٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪٤٣ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٩ ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ‪٥٢ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٥٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪٥٦...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٥٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٥٨ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٦١ .....‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٦٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪٧٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٧٧........................................... P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٧٨ .......... ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٧٨ ................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٨٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٨٧ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٩٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪١٠١........C2‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪١٠٢ ............([Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪١٠٣ .........([Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪١٠٣ .............................([M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٠٥ ..........‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٠٧ .......................(FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١١١.....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١١٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪١١٦ ...................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١٢٠ ...................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢١ .........................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٨ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪١٢٩ ................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫<‪١٣٠ ............‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪١٣٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪١٣٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٣٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٣٩..........................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٤٠ ..... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪١٤٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١٤٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٤٦ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٤٨ ..................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪١٤٩ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪١٥٥ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٥٧ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٦٠ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪١٦١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪١٦٣ .........‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٦٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪١٦٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪١٦٦ .............‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪١٦٩....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪١٧٠ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٧٩........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪١٨٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٨١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٨٤ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٩٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩٧ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪٢٠٥...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪٢٠٦ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٢١٠ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٢١٣ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٢١٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪٢٢٧ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪٢٢٧ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪٢٣٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪٢٣٥ ...‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ(‪٣٣ ،٣١ ..................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٥٧ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫)= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﻴﻦ“‬
‫)= ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫)= ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺲ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪٩٣ ،٩٢ ،٥٨ ،٣١......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪٩٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪٦٩ ،٣٩ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٤١ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪١١٥ ،٤٣................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪٣٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪١١٢...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪١٢٢...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٨٤.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٩٥.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪١١٦...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٦..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٧٥ ،٣١ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪١١٢...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩٧............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ‪١٩٥...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪١٤١...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪١٤٢..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٦٣..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﺪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ( ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﺼﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ /‬ﻓﺎﻏﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﱠﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ‬‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء‬
‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ – ﻭ‪ .+‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٢......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ‪١٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٢ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٢ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٦ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪١٧..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪١٧ ................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٩ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫˾‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫˼‬
‫˽‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫˻‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪CB-2LGE‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ‪ S‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) (‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LG l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ) ( ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LGE l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫˻‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٨‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ [o][p‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫]‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻢ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً‪ ،(١٨١ = ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <h‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )= ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪٢٢..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٢٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪٢٣...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٣...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ‪٢٤..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ‪٢٤ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ‪٢٤ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٥................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٥................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٢٦..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٢٨.............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪٢٩...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٩....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(١٧٢‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (١٣٩ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪.(١٩٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )= ‪.(١٠١ ،٧٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪،١٧‬‬
‫‪.(٣٣ ،٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˼‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﺨﻔﻀﻬﺎ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ) (‪ّ ،‬‬
‫) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ) ‪ ( ٣‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٢٠ – ٢١٨‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ ،[4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ ،[1‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )= ‪.(٢٢٠ – ٢١٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<n‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٤٨‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫[‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (٣‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪ (١٩٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٠٣ ،١٠٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣١...................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪٤٣....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٥٤................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٣١ ................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٣٣ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪٣٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٣٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٣٧ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪٤٤ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٤٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪٤٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪٥٤ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٥٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٥٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪٣٨..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٣٨ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ( ‪٣٩ ............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٣٩ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ( ‪٤١ ......................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪٤١ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٤٢ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٩...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ( ‪٥٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٥٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ‪٥١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪٥٢ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪٥٢.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٥٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪٥٣ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(٣٧ ،٣٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <h‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٣‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(٣١‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٣١ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٣١‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٣١ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ )= ‪(١٢٣‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )= ‪ (١٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٧١‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )= ‪.(١٧٥‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٦‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ < ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<l‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [h‬ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( )= ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٦‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍء[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪.(٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ*‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻛﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ]‬
‫] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻧﺎﺱ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻧﺎﺱ ﻭﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻧﺎﺱ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ( ﻭﺗﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﻧﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺗﺒﺴﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻡ( ﻭﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ] [ )= ‪ ،(٤٢ ،٣٦‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪ :(٥١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺭﺿﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ﻃﻔﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ )ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ( )= ‪ .(٤٤‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )= ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٧٧ =) [G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،[ ] :‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[W‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻧﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :W‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻔﻮﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ* )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪(Hybrid IS‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺯﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ )ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪ IS‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٩٩‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.IS‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻓﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٧٧ =) [G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪.<i‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪<i‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(٥٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫> < ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻭ‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ‪ ٨٥‬ﻭ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]][ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]][‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ ،(٣٨‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫> < ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ][[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ][[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[$‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٣٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[$‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ )= ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]^[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪(١٩٧‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (٢٠١‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [W‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[W‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ )= ‪ (٥١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[‬
‫)= ‪ (٥١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ ،(٤١‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(١٢٦‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١١٩‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٣‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(١٢٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ (١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٣٧ – ١٣٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١٩٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ,(٢٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(٢٠٣‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١١٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ )= ‪ً (١١٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ( ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(٢٦ =) <m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻆ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺒﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ”ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ“ ﻭ”ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ“‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٣٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﻞء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ )= ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﺆﻻء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻛﺄﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺸﺎﺭﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻛﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪.(١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﻫﻬﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ )= ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪ (١٠٦‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ( )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٩٥ ،٤٢‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻊ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<7‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﻫﻬﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ؛‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺒﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )= ‪ ،(٤٧‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ (٤٤‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ( ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤:٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ )= ‪ (١١٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ (١٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻪ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪.(١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(٣:٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٤٢٠) A2‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ٥٩٤ x‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪x ٢٩٧) A3 – A5‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٠ x ١٤٨ – ٤٢٠‬ﻣﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠ x ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪]l‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[R‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺎءﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<r‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<r‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﺑﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ[‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺋﺒﻖ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻛﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[( ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ>‪ <l‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫[ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ ،[4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ )= ‪.(١٧٥‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻻ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻋﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ :(٣٨‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪(١٨٤‬‬‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪.(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪.(٩٥ ،٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ“ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪AF-‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪ [AF-‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(٢٦ =) <m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‪٥٧...............‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٥٨............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٦١...........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ( ‪٦٢ ............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ )ﺣﻨﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺿﻲ( ‪٦٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‪٦٣ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ( ‪٦٤ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ( ‪٦٥ ....................‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪٦٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺲ‪٦٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٦٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٦٧...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٦٧ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺮﺻﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻧﺠﻤﺔ(‪٧٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪٧٥....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٧٥ ............................................ [E‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٧٦ .................................................... iFrame‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ً ٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫< ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻄﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[K‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[K‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء )ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‬
‫)= ‪.(١٨٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬
‫)= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٥٨ =) [S‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‪ ،[S‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[t‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[t‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥٨‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[S‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ Macro‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪ (٢٣٠‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[8‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ .(٥٨ =) [S‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[S‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥٨‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[S‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﺣﻴﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﺇﻳﺤﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺰﺧﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺘﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻭﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ )ﺣﻨﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺘﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )= ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ُﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [‬
‫)= ‪ .(٤٩‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻫﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ّ ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٦١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻤﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ٍ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٥٣‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺑﺘﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺒﻂء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٥٣‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ .(٩٢‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻀﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻣﻚ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٥٣‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺮﺻﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻧﺠﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<h‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑ ًﺘﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮّﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪ .(٧٨‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮّﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٩٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺻﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪< MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ[ < ]ﺳﻠﺲ[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮّﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ < MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ < ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺻﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ[ < ]ﺳﻠﺲ[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (١٠٠‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫< ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻ ﺗُ ْﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﺷﻜﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (١٠٠‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥٨‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<q><r‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪ (١١١‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<7‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻ ﺗُ ْﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١٧٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٨‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﺷﻜﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﻼء‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ [ ] :‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(١٢٦‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (١٠٠‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٥٨‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )= ‪ (٧٠‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٧١‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)= ‪ (٧٢‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪.(٧٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٨٥ =) ٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪[E‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[E‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[E‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢٥ – ٢١٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .iFrame‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<E‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [E‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٢‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫• ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[G‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[G‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪ ،[G‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )= ‪.(٢٢٥ – ٢١٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٧٨................................ ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٧٨.......................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٧٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٧٩ .......................... (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٧٩ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٨٠ ..........................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ )‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪٨١ .......................‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٨٢ ..............(AEB‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٨٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ‪٨٣ ...................................................ND‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٨٤............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٩٦....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٨٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪٨٥ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٩٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٩٧ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩٧ ................................................ FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٩٨ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٨٧.................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪٨٧ .......................................... (Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪٨٧ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪٨٨ ........................................................ .‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪٩٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٩٠ ....................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٩٣ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( ‪٩٣ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ( ‪٩٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩٥ ................................................ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪٩٥ .......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٩٨.....................................................RAW‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٩٩...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٩٩ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪٩٩ .....................................................IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٠٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[G‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[G‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٠٠ – ٧٨‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،(٩٦ = ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [G‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ (٢٥ =) FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[G‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫> < ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ] [ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ .(AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪.(٨٠ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ“ )=‪(٧٩‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪[AF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ )= ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪200 ،160 ،125 ،100‬‬
‫‪800 ،640 ،500 ،400 ،320 ،250‬‬
‫‪،2500 ،2000 ،1600 ،1250 ،1000‬‬
‫‪،8000 ،6400 ،5000 ،4000 ،3200‬‬
‫‪12800 ،10000‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ]‪،[12800] – [400‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(٢٦ =) <m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪] ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪] :‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪ٍ ،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ )‪ NR‬ﻟـ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪(٨٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<l‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AEB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]![ )= ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٩٥‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ )= ‪ ،(٧٨‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.(٤٠ =) [$‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ ،(٥٣‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪(DR‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )= ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫–‬
‫]‪[12800] – [100] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٢٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٤٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ‪ND‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ‪ ،ND‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١/٨‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ )ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫]‪[3200] – [200] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫]‪[3200] – [400] ،[AUTO‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٨٠ =) ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫• ‪ :ND‬ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ Fluorescent H‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء )= ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٤‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٤‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪.A‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ؛ ‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٧‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﱡ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )= ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪.٥ – ١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪ (٨٥‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻒ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺘﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[e‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪) [e‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[e‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ][[‬
‫)= ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ ،[e‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[f‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<f‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [f‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.MF‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪MF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ (٩٠ =) AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [1‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪(٩١ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (٩٠‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪ ،(١٨٦‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ < [4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.[MF-‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪(٢٦ =) MENU‬‬
‫< ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ] [ )= ‪ (٦٢‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٦٣‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٦٣‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫] [ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪ ،(٧٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [AF+MF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(BKT-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<7‬ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ (٧٩ =) AE‬ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )= ‪ (٩٠‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪ [MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )=‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<l‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]![ )= ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪ (٩٥‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.(٤٠ =) [$‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ ،(٥٣‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(٥٣ =) AF‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(“ )= ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (٥٣ =) [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ )‪ ١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.[1‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ AE‬ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ‪.(٨٠ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٩٠‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫<‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪AiAF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)] [ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ً ٣١ :‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ً ٢٥ :‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ ] [‪ً ٢١ :‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪ (٩٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻲء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [4‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪.(٩٢ =) [AiAF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ] [ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪.(٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪[AiAF‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]^[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،(٨٧ =) [e‬ﻓﺴﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪ .(٤٣‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<f‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )‪.(= ٢٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [f‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪.MF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <f‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪ [f‬ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ MF‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٥٩ =) [t‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪ (٨٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٩٥ =) AF‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ ،(٤١‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫]‪ [Z‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <h‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [h‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪،(<7‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<h‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺊ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫]![ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )=‪ ،(٧٨‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ٣/١‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٧٩ =) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٩٦ =) [h‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫> < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪] < [FE‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<r‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ (٤١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.FE‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫\‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)‪.(= ٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺧﺎﻡ“ )ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ (١٩٤ =) Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺧﺎﻡ“ )ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ )‪ (Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .TIFF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ – ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ – JPEG‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﻭﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪ (٤١‬ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ )= ‪ (٨١‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ (٨٢‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪.CR2‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ] [ )ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻭ] [ )ﺩﻗﻴﻖ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ٣:٢‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ*‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( )= ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٩٩‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.(٢٧ =) [2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺜﻞ‪.(٧٠ =) [ ] ،‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪١٠٢..................................([Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪١٠٣..............................([Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪١٠٣........ ([M‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١٠٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٠٥................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪١٠٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٠٦ .............................................‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٠٧.............(FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٠٧ .............................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٠٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪١٠٩ ................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[M‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫< ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١/٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )= ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[M‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“ )= ‪(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[B‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[B‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ >‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫< ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[B‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ]‪ [M‬ﻭ]‪ ،[B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ .(٢٦‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [q‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [r‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[h‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ً AE‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[D‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫> < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪] ،‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪] ،‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪< [4‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ]‪ [M‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [B‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٢٦ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ < ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ]‪ [G‬ﻭ]‪ [B‬ﻭ]‪ [M‬ﻭ]‪.[D‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<m‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪،<7‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<E‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ > <> <>‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﺃﻭ >‪ <E‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫•‬
‫< ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<E‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪ (٨٤‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫< ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<E‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[%‬‬
‫< ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<E‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﱟ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ‬‫ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻭ]‪ [E‬ﻭ] [ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪.<E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )= ‪ (٢٥‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<m‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺑـ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑـ ] [( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(٢٦ =) <m‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )= ‪ (١١٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ]‪ [G‬ﻭ]‪ [M‬ﻭ]‪ [B‬ﻭ]‪.[D‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ [.FUNC‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ>‪.(٢٦ =) <m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .FUNC.‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑـ ] [( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ“ )= ‪ ،(١٠٩‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )]‪ ،[G‬ﻭ]‪ ،[M‬ﻭ]‪ ،[B‬ﻭ]‪([D‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[M‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [B‬ﺃﻭ ]‪(١٠٤ – ٧٨ =) [D‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١٠٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <r‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )= ‪(٨٧‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )= ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ )= ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﺮﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻠﻪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻉ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ[ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻓﺮﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١١٢.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٣..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪١٣٢..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١١٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪١١٥ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١١٥ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪١٢٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪١٢٤ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪١٢٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪١٢٥ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ ‪١١٦.........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٦...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٣٢ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٣٣ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪١٣٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪١٣٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪١٣٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪١١٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪١١٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪١١٨ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪١١٩ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪١٢٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٣٦...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪١٢٠.........................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢١................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١٢٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪١٢٢ ..............‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٨...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٢٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪١٢٩.......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ‪١٣٠..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٣٠.........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟـ ] [ ‪١٣٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٣١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٣٧ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٣٨ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [1‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ[ < ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٦ =) MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [1‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛‬
‫ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫]‪ [o][p‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪.٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]^[ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ ،RGB‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪،RGB‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٤‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١٣ ،١٠٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ .(١٦٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ً [---‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﻨﺘﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫• ‪) UTC: Coordinated Universal Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﱠ‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٣٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ )= ‪ ،(١١٤‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪.(٤٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٦‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [1‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ < ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <g‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫>‪ .<k‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[1‬‬
‫< ]ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٣‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ )= ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<7‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪” (٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪،(١١٦‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(١٢١‬ﻭ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪ .(١٢٢‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (١٢٣‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (٢٠١ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٢٠٣‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ ،(١٣٥ – ١٣٢‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ] [‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [“ )= ‪ ،(١١٧‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [“ )= ‪ (١١٧‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺘﺎﺣًﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > <‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ“ )= ‪ (١١٨‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ > < ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤّﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫)= ‪ (٩٥ ،٤٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪ (٥٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‬
‫)= ‪ .(٧٣‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑـ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <m‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٦‬ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ .(١٢١‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢٣‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪“(DPOF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٢٠١‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(٢٠٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [1‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٢٦‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء“ )= ‪ ،(١٢٠‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪.<g‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪.<7‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﱟ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (٢٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ .<7‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )= ‪(١١٦‬‬‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪(١١٩‬‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟ َﻌﺮَﺿﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭًﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(١٧٤ ،١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪،(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪،(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٢٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺘﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑـ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻓﺘﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<a‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ]‬
‫]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ‪ ،[JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫‪ [JPEG+‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺤﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭًﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪،(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪،(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮ ًﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪(١٢٥ – ١٢٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(١٢٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٢٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (١٢٨‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(١٢٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪ ،(١١٢‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )= ‪ ،(١٢٢‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ ،(١٢٣‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٢٦‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ ،(٢٠١ =) (DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ )‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows Vista‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪(.RAW‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪.(١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺧﺼﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫<‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺴﻴﺔ )ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟـ ] [‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‬
‫< ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪ [2‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟـ ]‬
‫ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻭ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(١٣٩ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (١٣٦ – ١٣٢‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ]‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻛـ ]‬
‫[ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻭﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٣‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )= ‪ (١٢١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫)= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ [q][r‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]*[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪،(١١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]*[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻦ‬
‫] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺺ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻂ ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺬﺕ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً‪.(١٨١ = ،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( )= ‪ (٣٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٥‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٤٠......................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪١٤٩............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪١٦٣...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪١٤٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١٤١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٤١ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٤١ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ‪١٤١ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪١٤٩ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪١٥٠ ...........................WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٥٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪١٦٣ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٦٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪١٤٢..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪١٤٢ ...................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٤٤ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪١٤٥.....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٤٦................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٤٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٤٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪١٤٨ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٤٨........................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٤٨ ........................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪١٤٩ ...................................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪١٥٥...........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪١٥٧ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٥٧................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥٨..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ‪١٥٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٥٩ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٦٠ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٦٠......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ‪١٦١...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪١٦١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ‪١٦٢ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪١٦٣ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٦٥.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٦٥.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ‪١٦٦..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪١٦٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١٦٨ ...............‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،(١٤٨ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .*GATEWAY‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫* ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻤﻦ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪GATEWAY‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (٢٣٥‬ﻭ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ“ )= ‪.(٢٣٦‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫• ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫˼‬
‫‪ ،SNS‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )= ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪*(١٥٨‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫˻‬
‫‪App Store/‬‬
‫‪Google Play‬‬
‫˾‬
‫˼ ˺‬
‫˽‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫˼ ˻‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً )= ‪ (١٥٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ )= ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(١٤٨ = ،‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (DPS over IP‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫˻‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪(١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪(١٥٨‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓً )= ‪ (١٥٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(١٤٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪(١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻔﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ُﺗ َ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ ،http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻀﻮ )ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(١٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )= ‪.(١٥٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً )= ‪.(١٤٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (١٤٢ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (١٦٣‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٤٤ =) ٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ [WPS‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٥١ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،(١٤٨ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪) NFC‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ‪Google‬‬
‫‪ Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPad‬ﺃﻭ ‪،iPod touch‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٥٥ ،١٤٩‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ً‬‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ )ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﻤﱠﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪ Mac OS X 10.8.2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.7‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪/Install without connecting the device‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ( ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.(ICMP‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎ ًﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭًﺍ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً ١٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪< [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<q><r‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪< [3‬‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪.(٢٢٨ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫○ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫○ ‪) WEP‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ(‬
‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (TKIP‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (AES‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (AES‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫○‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ )‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS‬‬
‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻟـ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪.“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ < (٢٦‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(١٤٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ )= ‪ ،(١٥٥‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،[WPS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪) NFC‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (١٤٥ = ، ) N‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١٢‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٩‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺑﺪﺃ“ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪ (١٦٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )= ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )= ‪ (١٦٠‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٩٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١١‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١١‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ ،(١٣٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٥١ =) “WPS‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٩‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٥١ – ١٥٠ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )= ‪.(١٥٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ “WPS‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٥٢ =) ٩‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ “WPS‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٥٣ =) ١٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]*[ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٥٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(١٤٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪) NFC‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ (١٤٥ = ، ) N‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪ (١٦٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )= ‪.(١٦٥‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٩٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٧‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ[ <‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ ،(١٣٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(١٤٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ “WPS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(١٥١ =) ٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )= ‪ ،(١٣١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻬﺎ )= ‪ ،(١٣٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .(٣ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮ ًﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٣‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٥٨‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ )ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ :Windows l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.[Canon‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.(RAW‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (١٦٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ (١٥١ =) “WPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ّ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(١٥١ =) “WPS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪ً (١٥٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠّﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )= ‪ً (١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(“ )= ‪.(١٦٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ] [ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪.(١٤٤ – ١٤٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٦١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > <‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(١٦٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(١٦٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows l‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS l‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑـ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .(١٤٢ =) iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“ )= ‪ (١٤٤‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (١٥٠ =) “WPS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً‪.(١٨١ = ،‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫)= ‪ (١٤٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ (.(١٥‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ ،(١٧١‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٥٦ ،١٥٣‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )= ‪.(١٤١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ )= ‪ ،(١٥٦ ،١٥٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (١٤٥ =) CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٥٦ ،١٥٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﺘﺎﺣًﺎ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ > < )= ‪.(١٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(١٤٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺎ ًﺯﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺎ ًﺯﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٦٧‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮًﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(١٥٦ ،١٥٣‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(١٦٧‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٦٧‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٦ =) [3‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ً Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(١٧٨ =) [3‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٧٠......................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٧٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١٧٠ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪١٧٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪١٧١ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١٧١ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪١٧١ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٧٢ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪١٧٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٧٢ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٧٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪١٧٣ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١٧٣ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٧٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٧٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪١٧٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪١٧٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ‪١٧٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٧٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٧٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪١٧٧ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٧٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪١٧٧ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪١٧٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ .[3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (١١٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ (٢٥ =) FUNC.‬ﺃﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(٢٦‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<o><p‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ[ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)= ‪ .(٢٢‬ﻭﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢١٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١٧٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ (.[3‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ (9999 – 0001‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢،٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )=‪ ،(١٧٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<o><p‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٧٣‬ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(١٧٣‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.((١٧٣‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻳﻮﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )= ‪ (١٠٦‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍء ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪(٨٧ =) MF‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (١٦٥‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،(<7‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (١٧٦‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <7‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٨٦‬‬
‫• ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪(١٨٥ =) [HDMI‬‬
‫• ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(١٣٩ =) [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ[ )= ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤٣‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] [3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (١٧١‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ (١٧١‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬‫)= ‪ (١٧٧‬ﻭ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٨٦‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪(٨٤‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٥٨ =) [K‬ﺃﻭ ] [ )= ‪(٦١‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٧٥‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(١٣٩ =) Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪(١٧٥‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ )= ‪(١٧٦‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪١٨٠...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٨١...................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٨١ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٨٢ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٨٢ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪١٨٣ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٨٤.........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٨٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٨٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً( ‪١٨٨ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪١٨٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ً‬
‫ﻼ( ‪١٨٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٩٠ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ً‬
‫ﻼ(‪١٩٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ً‬
‫ﻼ( ‪١٩٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٩٤.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٩٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‪١٩٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٩٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٩٧..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪١٩٧ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٩٨ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٢٠٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪٢٠١ ...........................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‪٢٠٣ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﺎﺋﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪*Speedlite‬‬
‫‪،600EX ،600EX-RT‬‬
‫‪،430EX II ،580EX II‬‬
‫‪320EX ،270EX II‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‬
‫‪WP-DC53‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*CB-2LG/CB-2LGE‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪*(D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪EVF-DC1‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪.(IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،Speedlite 580EX :‬ﻭ‪ ،430EX‬ﻭ‪ ،270EX‬ﻭ‪Speedlite ،220EX‬‬
‫‪ ،Transmitter ST-E2‬ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite SB-E2‬ﻭ‪.Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪.FA-DC58E‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻢ(*‬
‫‪LH-DC80‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪*NB-12L‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC100‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-12L‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LG/CB-2LGE‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-12L‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ [.‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC100 AC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite SB-E2‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪Off-Camera Shoe‬‬
‫‪.Cord OC-E3‬‬
‫‪Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪EVF-DC1‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪.(Speedlite 220EX/270EX‬‬
‫‪Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/‬‬
‫‪580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ‪ Speedlite 580EX‬ﻭ‪ 430EX‬ﻭ‪270EX‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 220EX‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ‪WP-DC53‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ً ٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪LH-DC80‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪FA-DC58E‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ .OK/Select‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ OK/Select‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٨٤‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )= ‪ (٩٥ ،٤٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٧ ،٤٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ )= ‪) .(٧٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪.HDMI CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (PAL‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (٥٣ =) AF‬ﻭ‪ -MF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ )= ‪ (٨٨‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ‪(٨٩ =) MF‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ )= ‪ (١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) ACK-DC100 AC‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٨٤‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٣‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.((١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ LH-DC80‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ) ( ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪) FA-DC58E‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫˻‬
‫‪١٨٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺎ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ) ( ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ]ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻦ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ً‬
‫ﻼ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ RS-60E3‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ )ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ً‬
‫ﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٩٠‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﻳﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩١‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <UNLOCK‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (٤٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ < ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ > < ﺑﻤﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‪[G‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻼﺳﺔ )ﺳﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ [B‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [D‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ < (٢٦ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] < [4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ < ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ (١٤٠ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪ (١٧٣‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼ ً‬
‫ﻼ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ .Speedlite EX‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ً Speedlite 320EX‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪.LED‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.Speedlite EX‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟـ ‪ Speedlite 600EX-RT‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) Canon‬ﻭﺑﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ Speedlite EX‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪Speedlite EX‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [h‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[B‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.[D‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )= ‪.(١٩٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٨٤ =) [h‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ، [4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )= ‪.(١٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ Speedlite EX‬ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ 600EX-RT/580EX II‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ً‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻭﺑﻮﺳﻜﻮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 320EX‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪) Speedlite SB-E2‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫‪ SB-E2‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [M‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [B‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[D‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻭ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪) .‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪B M‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+3‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ ٥*1/128‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 1/1‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 1/3‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪/1‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪/2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ*‬
‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺊ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪*FE‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ E-TTL‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ M‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ ،[D‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ً E-TTL‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[+0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 600EX-RT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 600EX‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 580EX II‬ﺃﻭ ‪430EX II‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ١/٦٤ ٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX‬‬
‫*‪ ٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫‪ .430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪) .[2‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪ ،[2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ‪(.[1‬‬
‫*‪ ٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٨‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺊ[ ﻭ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪[FE‬‬
‫ﻭ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻭ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٧٨‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ( ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫)ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ( ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )= ‪.(٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ )ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista SP2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP SP3‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٤٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ‪ :XP‬ﻟﺒﺪء ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads Images From‬‬
‫‪/Canon Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ [Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪.[CameraWindow] ◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.(RAW‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ‪1‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(١٨٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٩٧‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١٩٨‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٩٨‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<7‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٩٧‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٩٨‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٣:٢‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٣٠ x ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١٩٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<q><r‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪(١٩٧‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪(١٩٩‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ .[2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (٢٠٣‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.Digital Print Order Format (DPOF‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠١‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺱ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(١٥ =) [3‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (١٢٤‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪،(٢٠٣ – ٢٠١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٢٠٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٢٠٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٢٠٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٢٠٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<7‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪٢٠٦........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢١٠.....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢١٣..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪٢١٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪٢١٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٢١٦..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢١٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢١٨ ........................................................... FUNC.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٢١ .......................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪٢٢٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪٢٢٦ ........................................‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٢٢٦ .........................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٢٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪٢٢٧......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢٢٧.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪ ،(١١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ )= ‪.(١٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )= ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )= ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ )=‪ .(١٥‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )=‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٩٦ =) [h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٨٦‬‬
‫‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (٢٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )= ‪.(٤١‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‪ [h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٨٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪.(٢٣٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٥٤‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٠٤ ،٩٧‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﺮّﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.(٩٥ ،٩٠ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٨٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٥٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﱡﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ .(٥٤‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪ (٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺮﺏ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٩٦ =) [h‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(١٣٤ ،٨٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(١٧٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪“FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(٢٢٥ – ٢١٦‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٧٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٠٤ ،٩٧‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٨٠ =) ISO‬‬
‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ .(٤٣‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٧١‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٢٢٩ ،١٧٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(١٧٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(٢٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٧٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬
‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٧٣‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )= ‪ (١١٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ )= ‪ ،(١٧٠‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪/.‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪.(١٦٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺟﺮّﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻔًﺎ ﺫﻛﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )= ‪.(١٤٢‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )= ‪.(١٤٥‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(١٤٩ ،١٤٦ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ .(٢٢٨‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪ .(١٦٣‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(١٥٩‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(١٦٨ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺠﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺌﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/.‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )= ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ!‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪(١٧٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ* )=‪ ،(١٢٠‬ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ* )=‪ ،(١٢١‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ* )=‪ ،(١٢٢‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ* )=‪ ،(١٢٨‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫)=‪ ،(١٢٩‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ* )=‪ ،(١٣٦ – ١٣٢‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ* )=‪ ،(٢٠١‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ* )=‪.(٢٠٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ )=‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ ،(٢٠٢ ،١٢٧ ،١٢٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )= ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٤‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (٢٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(٢٠٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (٢٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (٢٠٣‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٠١ ،٧٧ ،٥٦ ،٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫– ‪ .(١٣٦‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫• ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪.(٢١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ )= ‪.(٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(١٢‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻲ! )= ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢١٠‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪MOV‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٣‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ )= ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٩‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (٢٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (١٧٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻮءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪.(١٤٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١٩٧‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(١٩٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪.(١٤٩‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗُﺤﺠﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،C1‬ﻭ‪C2‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (١٦٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ